GM Owner Manuals

GM Owner Manuals
2004 Chevrolet Optra Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-29
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-51
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-60
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-18
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-37
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-39
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-24
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-40
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-31
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-44
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-50
Tires
...................................................... 5-51
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-73
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-81
Electrical System ...................................... 5-82
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-90
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-91
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, and the CHEVROLET Emblem are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
The name OPTRA is a trademark of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 04OPTRA A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 10/13/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
{CAUTION:
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats (With Sliding
Storage Tray) .............................................1-2
Manual Seats (Without Sliding Storage Tray) ......1-3
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Driver Position ..............................................1-15
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-24
Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-28
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-28
Child Restraints .............................................1-29
Older Children ..............................................1-29
Infants and Young Children ............................1-31
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Top Strap ....................................................1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-48
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-51
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-54
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-56
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-57
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-58
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-60
Restraint System Check ..................................1-60
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-61
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats (With Sliding
Storage Tray)
If your vehicle has a sliding storage tray under the front
seat, the manual seat lever looks like this.
Pull up and hold the lever
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the
lever. Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
Manual Seats (Without Sliding
Storage Tray)
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle does not have a sliding storage tray
under the front seat, the manual seat bar looks like this.
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
1-3
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
To adjust the height of the
driver’s seat cushion, turn
the knobs located on
the outboard side of the
seat cushion.
Turn the front knob to adjust the height of the front
portion of the seat cushion. Turn the rear knob to adjust
the height of the rear portion of the seat cushion.
1-4
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have manually operated lumbar
support for the driver’s seat.
To adjust the front seat
lumbar support, use the
lever located on the
outboard side of the
seatback.
Push the lever down to adjust the support for the lower
part of the seatback. Pull the lever up to return the
support to its original position.
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback, lift
the lever located on the
outboard side of the
seat and move the
seatback to where you
want it.
Release the lever and push rearward on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback
and the seatback will go to an upright position.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
CAUTION:
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Head Restraints
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chances of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull up the head restraint in order to adjust the position
upward.
1-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Folding the Seatback
Your vehicle has rear seatbacks that can be folded
down to increase cargo space.
To fold down the seatback, do the following:
1. Push the rear head restraints as far down as
possible.
Push in the release button in order to adjust the position
downward.
2. Press down on the
release button located
on top of the rear
seatback.
The rear head restraints may also be adjusted. Push in
the release button and move the head restraint to
the desired position.
To remove the head restraint, pull the head restraint all
the way up. Then push in the release button and lift
the head restraint from the guide sleeve.
Replace the head restraint and reset it in the original
position before driving.
1-8
3. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
(Continued)
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift up the seatback and push it to its original
position. Ensure that the safety belts are not twisted
or caught under the seatback.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
CAUTION:
2. Push rearward firmly on the top of the seatback
until it latches securely in the fully upright position.
(Continued)
1-9
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
1-10
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-16
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
1-18
To move the shoulder belt height adjuster down,
squeeze the release button and move the height
adjuster to the desired position. You can move the
height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly see, Driver Position on page 1-15.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt.
1-24
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure you are using the correct buckle and that
the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-26
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-27
Center Rear Passenger Position
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
Your vehicle has a removable safety belt in the center
rear seating position. To install the center rear safety
belt, use the following instructions.
1. Pull the center rear safety belt from the retractor.
2. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety
belt strap into the buckle with the black release
button until the mechanism clicks. Make sure the
strap is not twisted. The sliding latch plate will face
the front of the vehicle.
To learn how to use the safety belt once it is installed,
see “Lap-Shoulder Belt” under Rear Seat Passengers on
page 1-24. The installed safety belt works the same
way as the safety belt in the rear outside seat positions.
1-28
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-61.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-31
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-32
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-36
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-37
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here’s why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
CAUTION:
1-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-39
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-41. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
{CAUTION:
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-40
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
You will find the anchors on your sedan behind the rear
seat on the filler panel.
Top strap anchors are already installed in your vehicle
for the rear seating positions.
You will find the anchors on your hatchback in the rear
cargo area.
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position because there is no place
to anchor the top strap.
Pull the front part of the
plastic cover upward to
access the top strap
anchors.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) for the rear outside seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-42
A
B
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has either label A or B on the seatback.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-43
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
These labels are located at each lower anchor position,
near the base of the seat.
Child restraints and booster cushions that can be used
with the LATCH system are identified with label A.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-39.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-45
3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clicks when
you put it into the buckle. This means you are using
the correct buckle. Also, make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be able to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-46
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
1-48
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats (With Sliding Storage Tray)
on page 1-2 or Manual Seats (Without Sliding
Storage Tray) on page 1-3.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-50
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If your vehicle has a side
impact air bag for the driver
it will say AIR BAG on the
air bag covering on the side
of the driver’s seatback
closest to the door.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
air bag for the driver.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-51
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt, even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes.
CAUTION:
1-52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
They are not designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air bags have provided in
the past.
The side impact air bag for the driver is
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the driver’s side
of your vehicle. It is not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly, whether or not there is an air
bag for that person.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle, and should
not lean on the door.
(Continued)
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
CAUTION:
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information.
(Continued)
1-53
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-54
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-55
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about
9 to 14 mph (14.5 to 23 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-56
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See “Air Bag Systems” in the Index. A driver’s side
impact air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes involving the driver’s door. A side
impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. A
driver’s side impact air bag is not designed to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
air bag should have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determined
by the angle of the impact and how quickly the
vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.
For side impact air bags, inflation is determined by
the location and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both the frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal air
bag modules are located inside the steering wheel
and instrument panel. For vehicles with a driver’s side
impact air bag, the air bag modules are located in
the seatback closest to the driver’s door.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
But the frontal air bags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and
many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s
motion is not toward the air bag. A side impact air bag
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward that air bag. Air bags should never
be regarded as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s side
impact air bag.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with a side impact air bag, the side
of the seatback closest to the driver’s door will be
hot. The parts of the bag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-58
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel, both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s side impact air
bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
1-59
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the air
bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
{CAUTION:
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt pretentioners and safety belt. Be sure to do
so. Then the new pretensioner and safety belt will be
there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
right front passenger’s safety belt pretensioners, even if
the frontal air bags have not deployed. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your air bag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-28.
If your vehicle is equipped with side air bags, the
driver’s seat assembly must be replaced after the side
air bag has been deployed.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-51.
1-61
✍ NOTES
1-62
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-9
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-10
Trunk (Sedan) ..............................................2-11
Liftgate (Hatchback) ......................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14
Manual Windows ..........................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-19
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-23
Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-27
Parking Brake ..............................................2-28
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) ......2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) .....2-31
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .........2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-35
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-37
Storage Areas ................................................2-37
Glove Box ...................................................2-37
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-37
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-38
Front Storage Area .......................................2-38
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-39
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-39
Sunroof .........................................................2-39
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
key tag and gives it to the first owner. The tag has a code
on it that tells your dealer how to make extra keys. For
vehicle security, keep the key tag in a safe place and also
record the key number somewhere other than inside of
the vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be able to have
a new one made easily using the tag.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who can
obtain the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
The following functions are available if your vehicle has
the remote keyless entry system:
W(Unlock):
Press this button to unlock all of the
doors. If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate
are closed, the hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate
that unlocking has occurred. The theft-deterrent
system will deactivate and the security indicator will
turn off. The security indicator is located on the base
of the driver’s door lock.
If a door is not opened or if the engine is not started within
30 seconds after pressing unlock on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, all of the doors will automatically relock
and the theft-deterrent system will reactivate.
2-4
Q (Lock):
Press this button to lock all of the doors. If all
of the doors and the trunk or liftgate are closed, the
hazard lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp to
indicate that locking has occurred. The theft-deterrent
system will activate and the security indicator will flash.
If the driver’s door is open while pressing lock, all of the
doors, except for the driver’s door will lock. If any door
other than the driver’s door is open while pressing lock,
all of the doors, including the driver’s door, will lock.
V(Trunk): Press this button to unlock the trunk or
liftgate.
If all of the doors are locked while pressing the trunk
button, the trunk or liftgate will not unlock. The
doors must be unlocked for the trunk button to unlock
the trunk or liftgate.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of five
transmitters matched to it.
The LED (A) on the transmitter will flash when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed.
The lock, unlock and trunk buttons will not operate and
the theft-deterrent system will not activate while the
key is in the ignition.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the LED fails to
illuminate or if the transmitter will not work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to get close to your
vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter unit out of the cover and open
the cover of the transmitter unit.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1616, or
equivalent, type battery.
4. Close the cover of the transmitter unit and put the
unit in the cover of the transmitter.
5. Assemble the transmitter cover and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so
water will not get in.
6. Test the transmitter operation.
2-6
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the optional keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-4.
2-7
To manually unlock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert the
key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
All doors, except for the
driver’s door, can be
locked from the outside
by pushing down the
manual door lock and
then closing the door.
If your vehicle has a security indicator, the indicator will
turn off when you unlock the door using the key or
the optional keyless entry transmitter. The indicator will
turn on when you lock the door using the key or the
keyless entry transmitter. The security indicator is
located on the base of the driver’s door lock.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock located
on the window sill on each door. You can also lock
and unlock the doors with the optional power door lock
switches located on the driver’s door trim pad.
Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle may have a central door unlocking system.
The central door unlocking system is activated from
the driver’s door.
The driver’s door lock cannot be pushed in while the
door is open. Upon leaving the vehicle, the driver’s door
can only be locked from the outside by using the key
or the optional remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-8
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all of the
doors on your vehicle from the driver’s door by using
either the key or the optional keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, you can lock or unlock all of the
doors using the driver’s door lock.
Power Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have power door locks.
With the power door locks,
you can unlock or lock the
doors on your vehicle
using the driver’s door lock
switch.
Your vehicle has rear door
security locks on each rear
door that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors on your
vehicle from the inside.
Push down the front part of the switch to unlock the
doors. Push down on the back part of the switch to lock
the doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors on your
vehicle is not closed
properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar
light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on
and stay on until the
doors are closed.
2-9
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lock upward to the lock position.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
2. Close the door.
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
2. Move the lock downward to the unlock position.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear will not be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how to cancel the locks.
2-10
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, you have
lockout protection. This feature stops the power door
locks from locking when the driver’s door is open.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving your vehicle, take your keys. All of
the doors, except for the driver’s door, can be locked
from the outside by pushing down the door lock and then
closing the door. The driver’s door can only be locked
from the outside by using the key or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter.
Trunk (Sedan)
To unlock the trunk on your sedan from the outside,
insert the key and turn it clockwise in the trunk
lock cylinder or use the remote keyless entry transmitter
if your vehicle has one.
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches. Although you may use one hand to
unlock the trunk, it is recommended that two hands on
the upper surface be used to close the trunk.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
(Continued)
2-11
Remote Trunk Release
Press the remote trunk
release button, located on
the side of the driver’s
door trim, to release
the trunk lid.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
2-12
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the underside of the
trunk lid. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open the
trunk from the inside.
Liftgate (Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
To unlock the liftgate on your hatchback from outside of
the vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and
turn it clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter if your vehicle has one. Then pull up the
handle above the license plate to open the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches. Although you may use one hand to unlock
the liftgate, it is recommended that two hands on the
upper surface be used to close the liftgate.
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinder
and turn it counterclockwise.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-14
Manual Windows
Express-Down Window
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
The driver’s window may also have an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the
switch then release it and the driver’s window will go all
the way down.
Power Windows
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the switch
again. To raise the window, pull up and hold the switch.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power window
switches are located on
the armrest on the
driver’s door.
Uplevel shown, Base
similar
In addition, each passenger door may have a switch for
its own window. The ignition must be turned to ON to
use the power windows. To lower a window, press down
on the switch. To raise a window, lift up on the switch.
Window Lockout
The driver’s power window
controls may also include
a lockout button.
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The driver
can still operate all the windows with the lock on.
Press the lockout button again to return to normal
window operation.
2-15
Sun Visors
Arming the System
To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
To arm the system, do the following:
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle also has vanity mirrors located on the back
of the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor and lift
the cover to expose the vanity mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
1. Turn the key to LOCK and remove the key from the
ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not operate the theft-deterrent system.
2. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the
trunk or liftgate.
Make sure the windows are closed, as the system
can be activated even if the windows are open.
3. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter must be used to activate
the theft-deterrent system.
• The LED on the transmitter will flash once.
• All of the doors will lock.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will chirp.
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock
the doors using the key or the manual door lock. It
activates only when you use the optional remote keyless
entry transmitter.
2-16
• The theft-deterrent mode will activate.
• The security light will flash once every second to
indicate that the theft-deterrent system is armed.
The security light is located on the base of
the driver’s door lock.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, use one of
the following methods:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, use one of the following methods:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the transmitter.
−
−
−
−
The LED on the transmitter will flash once.
All of the doors will unlock.
The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
The theft-deterrent mode will deactivate.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system with
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will reactivate.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened without using
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
• Press the lock or unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
reactivate the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard warning lamps flash once when you press
the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, that means the theft-deterrent system
alarm was triggered while you were away.
2-17
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn the
key to four different
positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do
not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-37 for more information.
2-18
{CAUTION:
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK and removing it will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer
the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you
need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key only to ACC. Do not push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
LOCK: This position locks your steering wheel, ignition,
shift lever and transaxle. This is the only position in which
you can insert or remove the key. For easier key
operation when unlocking the steering wheel, move the
steering wheel from right to left and turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories, such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan.
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But
even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch will return to
ON for normal driving. Do not turn the key to START
if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow
you to operate electrical accessories, such as the radio.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position — that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in neutral and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down – that’s a safety feature.
2-19
Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition
key to START. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t
“race” your engine when it’s cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-20
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very cold
weather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above
32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
2-21
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located to the right of the battery.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-22
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
If your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle, the
shift lever is located on the
console between the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can not move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your vehicle may also have an electronic shift position
indicator that displays the position of the shift lever.
This indicator is located to the right of the trip odometer
on the instrument panel cluster.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the shift lever to the passenger side while shifting.
This prevents you from changing positions unexpectedly
by blocking the straight movement of the shift lever
while the vehicle is moving.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on
page 2-29.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P)
while holding the brake pedal down, see Shifting Out
of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-31.
2-23
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
must press down on the shift lever while shifting.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you
increase speed may damage the transaxle. Have
your vehicle serviced right away.
2-24
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds over
65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the transaxle.
Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transaxle,
the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD
indicator light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-33 or Hold Mode Light
on page 3-32.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-25
Hold Mode
If your vehicle’s transaxle has hold mode, you can
select this mode to drive with some characteristics of a
manual transaxle. With hold mode turned on, the
automatic transaxle will stay in a specific gear range.
Press the HOLD button on
the shift lever console to
turn on hold mode.
When hold mode is activated, the transaxle operates in
the following ways:
• When the transaxle is in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D), the transaxle operates in a gear
range of SECOND (2) to THIRD (3) to AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) and tries to maintain AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for as long as possible.
• When the transaxle is in THIRD (3), the transaxle
operates in a gear range of SECOND (2) to
THIRD (3) and tries to maintain THIRD (3) for as
long as possible.
• When the transaxle is in SECOND (2), the transaxle
is fixed in that gear.
• When the transaxle is in FIRST (1), the transaxle is
fixed in that gear.
Hold Mode Functions
Winter Function
Press the button again to turn off hold mode, and return
to normal automatic transaxle operation.
While on, the HOLD indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will light up. See Hold Mode Light on
page 3-32.
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D), THIRD (3) or SECOND (2) to help the
vehicle maintain traction on slippery road surfaces,
such as snow, mud, or ice.
Manually Controlling Shift
Select hold mode to use your automatic transaxle like a
four-speed manual transaxle.
2-26
Manual Transaxle Operation
Five-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift
to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-27
Shift Speeds
Parking Brake
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
The parking brake lever is located between the bucket
seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.
2-28
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
pushing the lever toward the passenger side of the
vehicle and then up.
{CAUTION:
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
CAUTION:
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
(Continued)
2-29
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P). If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-30
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-29.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
4. Insert the key into the
shift-lock release slot
and press and hold
the key.
Your automatic transaxle vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system which locks the shift
lever in PARK (P) when the ignition is in LOCK. You
have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is turned to
ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-23.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding the
brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Pry off the cover over the shift-lock release slot using
a small, flat object, like a screwdriver. The shift-lock
release slot is located at the top of the shift lever.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the
engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-31
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transaxle)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shift
lever into the appropriate position as stated below:
• When parking on level ground, place the shift
lever into NEUTRAL.
• When parking downhill, place the shift lever in
REVERSE (R).
• When parking uphill, place the shift lever in
FIRST (1).
3. After shifting to the appropriate position, turn the
ignition key to LOCK, remove the key and release
the clutch.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-32
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
•
•
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
CAUTION:
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
2-33
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-25.
2-34
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-29.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from any
headlamps behind you. Push or pull the tab for
daytime/night use.
Outside Manual Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the control levers on the
driver’s and passenger’s doors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle.
2-35
Outside Power Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have outside power mirrors. The
control for the power mirrors is located on the driver’s
side door trim.
Move the outside power mirror control to L for the left
mirror and to R for the right mirror. If you place the
control in the center position, no movement of the mirror
will occur. To adjust a mirror, press the corresponding
edges located on the four-way control pad to move
the mirror in the direction that you want it to go.
The ignition must be turned to ON to adjust the mirrors.
2-36
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Glove Box
If your vehicle has this feature, when you operate the
rear window defogger, the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside power mirrors are warmed to help
clear them of ice and snow. See “Rear Window and
Outside Mirror Defogger” under Climate Control System
on page 3-19 for more information.
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward. Close the glove box with a firm push.
Storage Areas
Cupholder(s)
The cupholders are located in the center console and in
the rear seat center armrest. To use the front
cupholders, move the inner support forward or
backward. If your vehicle has rear cupholders, push
down the rear seat center armrest to use them.
Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each front seatback
for your convenience.
2-37
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Front Storage Area
The sunglasses storage compartment is located above
the driver’s door. To open the sunglasses storage
compartment, pull down and hold the upper part of the
cover. To close the compartment, let go of the cover
and the compartment will automatically close.
Your vehicle may have a sliding storage tray located
under the front passenger seat. To use the tray, pull up
on the end of the tray and pull it toward the instrument
panel. Push the tray toward the seat to return it to
its original position.
2-38
Front Armrest Storage Area
Sunroof
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage area. To open
the storage area, pull up on the lift lever and raise
the lid. To close the storage area, lower the lid and push
it down until it latches securely.
If your vehicle has this feature, the switch is located
between the map lamp buttons. The sunroof will
only operate when the ignition is turned to ON. The
sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it can be
express-opened all of the way.
Rear Seat Armrest
You must manually open and close the sunroof cover.
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that contains
two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the
armrest down from the rear seatback.
2-39
To fully open the sunroof, push the rear part of the switch.
The sunroof will open automatically until you push either
the front or the rear part of the switch again. To close the
sunroof, push the front part of the switch and hold it until
the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if the switch is
released during operation.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow can
be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and holding
the switch until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, push the front
part of the switch. To return the sunroof to its original
position, push the rear part of the switch and hold it until
the sunroof reaches the desired position.
2-40
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Windshield Wiper Lever ...................................3-8
Cruise Control ................................................3-9
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17
Clock ..........................................................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-24
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ............................3-28
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-28
Charging System Light ..................................3-29
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-31
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-31
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-33
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-36
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-37
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-37
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-38
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ...........3-38
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-38
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-39
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-39
Audio System(s) .............................................3-40
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-40
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-44
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-51
Radio Reception ...........................................3-51
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-52
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-52
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-52
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
3-2
The main components of your instrument panel are the
following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
C. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
D. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 3-18.
E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-40.
F. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
“Instrument Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps
on page 3-14.
G. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
H. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.
I. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
J. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-17.
K. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-17.
L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-37.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
Press the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located under the steering column.
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and push the
lever away from you. Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever toward you to
lock the wheel in place.
3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Fog Lamps, if equipped
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12.
3-6
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs. If the arrow still
does not work, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-83.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to ON.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions. See
“Fog Lamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-12 for
further information.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
3-7
Windshield Wiper Lever
Windshield Wipers
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the band on the
windshield wiper lever toward FAST or SLOW for a
shorter or longer delay between wipes. The wiper speed
can only be adjusted when the lever is in the INT position.
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward, but not completely in, the INT
position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band toward INT longer.
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition
must be turned to ON to operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
wiping at high speed.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-8
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
To wash your windshield, pull the windshield wiper/
washer lever toward you with the ignition turned to ON.
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain a
speed of about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you apply your brakes, or the clutch pedal if you
have a manual transaxle, the cruise control shuts off.
{CAUTION:
When you release the lever, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about two or
three cycles and will either stop or will resume at the
speed you were using before.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Your vehicle may have a rear window washer/wiper.
Operate the rear window washer/wiper system by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever away from
you. The wiper operates continuously when the lever is
in the first position. Washer fluid sprays onto the rear
window and the wiper operates continuously when
the lever is pushed to the second position.
3-9
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
The cruise control pad is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
1. Press the ON/OFF button to turn cruise control on.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on to show you that the cruise control is
on. See Cruise Control Light on page 3-37.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-10
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake pedal, or the clutch
pedal if you have a manual transaxle. This, of course,
shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset
it. Once you are going about 24 mph (39 km/h) or
more, you can briefly press the RESUME button.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold in the RESUME button longer, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the button
or apply the brake pedal. So unless you want to go
faster, do not hold in the RESUME button.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Press the SET button, then release the button and
the accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there until you
get up to the speed you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, briefly press the RESUME button
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pressing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press the SET button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the SET button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-11
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake pedal takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do
not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.
• Press the ON/OFF button on the cruise control pad.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-12
3(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition turned to
LOCK or ACC while leaving the lamps on, you will
hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset.
An indicator light will come on when the DRL are on. See
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light on page 3-38.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights will
not be illuminated unless you have turned the exterior
lamps control to the parking lamp or headlamp position.
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is off.
The parking brakes are on.
The high-beam headlamps are on.
The low-beam headlamps are on.
The flash-to-pass feature is used.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on in daylight when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
• The parking brake is released.
3-13
Fog Lamps
Interior Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The band for the fog lamps is located in the middle of
the turn signal/multifunction lever. While using the
fog lamps, the ignition must be on as well as the parking
lamps or low-beam headlamps.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on. An
indicator light will come on while the fog lamps are on.
See Fog Lamp Light on page 3-37.
Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off.
The fog lamps will also turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will turn on
again.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the instrument
panel lights or down to dim them.
3-14
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
The switch on this lamp
has three positions.
ON: The light comes on and stays on regardless of
whether a door is opened or closed.
O (Door):
The light comes on while a door is opened.
After all of the doors are closed, the light stays on for
about seven seconds, and then fades out. The light will
also turn off when the ignition is turned to ON.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
Your vehicle has map lamps. To turn a lamp on, press
the button next to it. Press the button again to turn
it off.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is opened.
3-15
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle has an accessory power outlet. With an
accessory power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located on the front of
the center console below the front ashtray.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when
the ignition is turned to ACC or ON.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-16
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray is located at the lower part of the
center of the instrument panel. To remove the bin from
the front ashtray for cleaning, open the ashtray fully,
lift up the inner bin and then pull the bin out.
The rear ashtray is located at the bottom of the rear
center console. Pull the ashtray toward the rear of the
vehicle to open it. To remove the rear ashtray, press
in the retaining spring and pull the bin out.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC or ON, push
the cigarette lighter in all the way and let go. When it
is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
3-17
Clock
Your vehicle has a digital clock located in the center of
the instrument panel. When the ignition is turned to
ACC or ON, the time is displayed in the digital clock.
There are three adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the M
button once. To go forward more than one minute, press
and hold the button until the correct minute is reached.
S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour, press
the S button.
For example, if this button is pressed while the time is
between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00. If this
button is pressed while the time is between 8:30 and
8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
3-18
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
9(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the middle knob:
E (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
( (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
5 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some of the air will also be directed to the
windshield, instrument panel side outlets, and the
rear outlets. Be sure to keep the area under the front
seats clear to allow the flow of air to the rear
compartment.
The middle knob can also be used to select the defog
and defrost modes. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
3-19
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to the
blue area to get cool air and to the red area to get
warm air.
A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, follow these steps to use the system. Start
the engine and set the fan control knob to the desired
fan speed. The air conditioning compressor does
not operate when the fan control knob is in the OFF
position. Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning
system on and off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator
light in the button will come on to let you know that
air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
3-20
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Press the A/C button.
4. Press the recirculation button.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
? (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air
from coming into the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more
quickly.
É (Defog):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air is
also directed to the outboard outlets for the side
windows and to the instrument panel side outlets.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light in
the button will come on. Press this button again to
return to outside air mode.
1. Select the bi-level mode.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select
the defrost mode.
4. Select the temperature.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side
windows. A small amount of air is also directed to the
instrument panel side outlets.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Select one of these available modes from the right knob.
3-21
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
Your vehicle may have a rear window and outside
mirror defogger. This feature will only work when the
ignition is turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
and outside mirror defogger on or off. An indicator
light in the button will come on to let your know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-22
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
located next to the outlets to turn them on and off.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may have a passenger compartment
air filter. It is located on the passenger side under the
glove box.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter, it may need
to be changed periodically.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
1. Remove the four screws from the filter cover
located below the glove box.
2. Remove the filter cover.
3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
3. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
4. Then reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
Ensure that the new filter is inserted to the correct
air flow.
3-24
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following
pages.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in kilometers.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
your engine speed in
revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of kilometers
traveled for up to two trips.
You can cycle between the odometer and trip odometers
A and B by pressing the reset button located in the
lower right area of the speedometer. By pressing the
reset button, you can tell how many kilometers have
been recorded on either Trip A or Trip B since you last
set the odometer back to zero.
To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button. The reset button resets only the trip
odometer that is displayed. Each trip odometer must be
reset individually.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the ignition is turned to ON
to remind people to fasten their safety belts. The tone
will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
3-28
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag
sensor, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on
the air bag system, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-51.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition to ON. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there is a problem.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive
belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-29
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON. If it does not
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-30
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle has an
anti-lock brake system, this
light will come on when the
ignition is turned to ON and
may stay on for several
seconds. That is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, you do
not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-30.
Speed Sensitive Power Steering
(SSPS) Warning Light
If your vehicle has Speed
Sensitive Power Steering
(SSPS), this warning
light will come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to ON as a check to
show you it is working.
Then it should go out after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not come on, have it fixed so it
will be able to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on while you are
driving, the SSPS system may not be working. If this
happens, see your dealer for service.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-31
Hold Mode Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will come
on when the hold mode
is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-23 for additional information
on this feature.
Your vehicle has an
engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition
turned to ON, this
gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-24.
3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and may cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
When the ignition is on, this light should come on and
should go out after a few seconds as a check to
show you it is working. If the light does not come on,
have it repaired.
3-33
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
3-34
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-35
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
Oil Pressure Light
on and then off.
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
3-36
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See “Fog Lamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-12
for more information.
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will come
on briefly when the
ignition is on.
If the light does not come on, then have it fixed so it will
be ready to tell you when the system is active.
The CRUISE light comes on whenever the cruise
control is set. See Cruise Control on page 3-9. The light
will turn off when the cruise control is turned off.
3-37
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Door Ajar Light
This light will stay on until
all doors are closed and
completely latched.
See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6 for additional
information.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Light
This light will come on
when the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are on.
See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” under Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12 for further information on the DRL
system.
3-38
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
Fuel Gage
or speed up.
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the
ignition is turned to ON.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on when
the fuel tank is low on fuel.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-39 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of fuel remaining in
the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
Your Tank on page 5-7.
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
3-39
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Radio with CD (Base Level)
Playing the Radio
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
3-40
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this knob
again to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. The pushbutton number
will flash on the display when the station has been
set. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
You can also automatically store six FM1 preset stations
with the strongest reception in the region. Press the AST
button for longer than one second. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM-FM button to cancel automatic store.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Then turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making your selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making your selection, press this button
to select the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
3-41
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and
voice. Then turn the volume knob until the desired
equalization setting appears on the display. When
finished making your selection, press the SOUND button
to select the equalization setting.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making your selection, press this button to
select the fade level.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display, then
press the SOUND button again to select the equalization
setting.
Playing a CD
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the
volume knob to increase or to decrease the balance
between the right and the left speakers. The display will
show the balance level. When finished making your
selection, press this button to select the balance level.
3-42
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (SCAN): Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each CD inserted. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press this
button again. The current track will begin to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
3-43
CD Messages
Radio with CD (MP3)
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Playing the Radio
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
Finding a Station
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this knob
again to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-44
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following
steps:
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Then turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making your selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. The pushbutton number
will flash on the display when the station has been
set. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
You can also automatically store six FM1 preset stations
with the strongest reception in the region. Press the AST
button for longer than one second. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM-FM button to cancel automatic store.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making your selection, press this button
to select the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and
voice. Then turn the volume knob until the desired
equalization setting appears on the display. When
finished making your selection, press the SOUND button
to select the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display, then
press the SOUND button again to select the equalization
setting.
3-45
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the
volume knob to increase or to decrease the balance
between the right and the left speakers. The display will
show the balance level. When finished making your
selection, press this button to select the balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making your selection, press this button to
select the fade level.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Playing a CD
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
3-46
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (SCAN): Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each CD inserted. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press this
button again. The current track will begin to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If this radio has MP3 capabilities, this MP3 player will
accept MP3 files that were recorded on an up to 700 MB
CD-R CD. The files can be recorded with the following
fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs,
80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192
kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or a variable bit
rate. Song title, artist name, and album will be available
when recorded using ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of 50
folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long file,
folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions
minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name. You
can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file
folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying
to locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50
playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you
access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items
over the maximum will be ignored.
3-47
Root Directory
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Order of Play
Empty Directory or Folder
Tracks will be played in the following order:
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions will have no function
on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
will display ROOT.
3-48
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play will
begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display,
see DISPL later in this section. The new track name
will be displayed.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such
as.mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, then MP3 will appear on the display. The CD
should begin playing. You can insert a CD with the
ignition off.
As each new track starts to play, F001, the track
number, and the song name will appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-49
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3, except for those listed here. See “Playing a
CD” earlier for more information.
5 DN (Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous directory.
6 UP: Press this pushbutton to go to the next directory.
TRACK (Previous/Next File): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the first track in the previous or to go to
the next folder. The player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD with each turn of
the knob.
DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to
repeat the tracks in the current directory. DIR will appear
on the display.
Press and release this button twice to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
Press and release this button again to turn off
repeat play.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-50
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent system is designed to discourage
theft of your radio. When the radio and vehicle are
turned off, your radio has a blinking red light to indicate
that the theft-deterrent system is activated.
The theft-deterrent system also activates when the
audio system has been disconnected from the battery.
When this occurs, the AF code and security code
will have to be entered in order to operate your radio.
An identification card stamped with the AF code
and security code will be provided with the vehicle.
Keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
To enter the security code do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Turn the radio on. AF or COdE will flash on the
display. If AF flashes on the display, go to Step
2. If COdE flashes on the display, go to Step 4.
3. Enter the AF code by using the preset pushbuttons.
COdE will flash on the display.
4. Enter the security code by using the preset
pushbuttons. When the complete security code is
entered, the code will flash three times.
If the security code is not entered correctly, Err will
appear on the display for a few seconds. When
COdE appears back on the display, repeat Step 4.
If the incorrect AF code is entered, an incorrect
frequency level may be chosen and the radio
reception may be affected. If this occurs, reset the
audio system by removing and re-installing the
AUDIO fuse. See “Instrument Panel Fuse Block”
under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-83 for
more information. Then repeat Steps 1 through 4.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-51
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
3-52
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be
sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. There is enough space between the lines to
attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care must be
taken when cleaning the rear window because it breaks
in the resistive material heating element and will
adversely affect radio and defogger performance. See
your dealer for details.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-11
Loss of Control .............................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
City Driving ..................................................4-19
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-23
Winter Driving ..............................................4-25
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-31
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-37
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
Drunken Driving
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age,
physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But
even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph
(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts − heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake.
4-6
Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard
stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a
lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate
a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better
braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling.
4-8
Once they do, the vehicle can not respond to your
steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it
was headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That
could be off the road, into the very thing you were trying
to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this by
pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”
in this section.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-11
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-12
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
4-13
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-14
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-16
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
CAUTION:
4-18
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
City Driving
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-51.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-20.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-20
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
4-22
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-23
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
possible.
•
•
4-24
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-51.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you will want to begin stopping sooner
than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock
brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on
the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily
to get the most traction you can.
4-26
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow.
4-27
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-28
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
4-30
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-63.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-22.
4-31
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transaxle
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC.
3. Put the vehicle in NEUTRAL.
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
6. Release the parking brake.
4-32
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the Maximum
Load weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on
your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
seating capacity and the maximum load your vehicle
can properly carry. The Tire and Loading information
label is either attached to the center pillar below the door
latch or inside of the glove box. This label also lists
your vehicle’s original equipment tire size and the
recommended tire inflation pressure. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-51
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.
4-33
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load”amount printed on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from the maximum load amount,
shown in pounds and kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “maximum load” amount equals 1400 lbs.
and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
4-34
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 2 =
B
C
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
load weight and seating positions. The combined weight
of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum load weight.
4-35
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The Certification label, found either on the center pillar,
near the driver’s door latch or on the end of the
driver’s door, tells you the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 123 lbs (56 kg) in your trunk.
4-36
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing a Trailer
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is not
designed or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer can
adversely affect handling, durability and fuel economy.
(Continued)
4-37
✍ NOTES
4-38
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-20
Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-20
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-21
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-24
Engine Overheating .......................................5-24
Cooling System ............................................5-27
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-44
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-44
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-44
Headlamps ..................................................5-44
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-45
Turn Signal Lamps (Side) ..............................5-46
Fog Lamps ..................................................5-46
Sidemarker Lamps (Front) ..............................5-47
Sidemarker Lamps (Rear) ..............................5-47
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-48
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-50
Tires ..............................................................5-51
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-57
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-58
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-59
Buying New Tires .........................................5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-60
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-62
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-62
Tire Chains ..................................................5-63
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-63
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-64
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-72
Appearance Care ............................................5-73
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-73
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-76
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-76
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .................5-76
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-78
Finish Damage .............................................5-78
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-79
5-2
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-79
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-79
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-81
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-81
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-81
Electrical System ............................................5-82
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-82
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-82
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-82
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-82
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-83
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-90
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-91
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-12.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-26.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-33 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
5-6
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not leave the
fuel pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle — this is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the fuel filler
door release lever located
on the floor to the left
of the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged door
on the passenger’s side of your vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it. If
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill your
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-76.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-33.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-33.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
3. Lift the hood, release
the hood prop from its
retainer and place
the hood prop into the
slot in the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the
secondary hood release lever. The secondary
hood release lever is located under the front center
of the hood.
4. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the hood and return the prop to
its retainer. Lower the hood 12 inches (30 cm)
above the vehicle and release it to latch fully.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat
the process if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the engine, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
D. Brake Fluid/Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-35 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-20.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-33.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-27.
G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-83.
H. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-34.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-36.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-14
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
If the oil is at or below the lower hole at the tip of the
dipstick (B), then you will need to add at least one quart
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-90.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole (A) that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-15
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-16
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
5-17
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-18
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the four screws that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
3. Check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 5-91 for replacement part numbers.
4. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the
screws.
See Using Your Maintenance Schedule on page 6-4 for
replacement intervals.
5-19
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
You may also have your fluid level checked by your
dealer or service center when you have your oil changed.
There is one reservoir for both the brake and the
hydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 5-35 for more
information.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235
may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235 labeled
automatic transaxle fluid.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled with
hydraulic fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your oil
changed. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24 for the proper fluid to use.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Part B:
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18 and Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
5-20
How to Check and Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −22°F (−30°C).
Give boiling protection up to 268°F (131°C)
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
You do not need to check the fluid level unless you
suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, look
on the side of the reservoir. If the fluid reaches the
MAX (A) mark on the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
The reservoir is located near the back of the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-21
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and coolant
that meets GM Specification 1825M, which will not
damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled
coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M with a
complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
For protection in extremely cold weather conditions, use
a 40/60 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
5-22
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would not get
the overheat warning. Your engine could catch
fire and you or others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the
proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the
MAX (A) and MIN (B) marks on the coolant surge
tank. The level rises at engine operation temperature
and drops again when the engine cools down.
5-23
Adding Coolant
If the level falls below the MIN (B) mark, add the proper
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Cooling System on
page 5-27 for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to
the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-32.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-25
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-26
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Make sure that the
air conditioning is turned off.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-27
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
The coolant level should be between the MIN (B) and
MAX (A) marks on the coolant surge tank when the
engine is cool. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
5-28
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible but
the coolant level is not between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)
marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
proper coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-21 for more information.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-29
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
5-30
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be
vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-31
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the MAX (A) mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the MAX (A) mark.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the MAX (A) mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if
the level is below the MAX (A) mark. If the level is
below the MAX (A) mark, add additional coolant
to bring the level up to the MAX (A) mark. Repeat
this procedure until the level remains constant
at the MAX (A) mark for at least five minutes.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
5-32
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool
down. Then check the fluid level.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The level should be between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)
marks on the reservoir. If the level is below the
MIN (B) mark, add the power steering fluid to the
appropriate level. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5-33
What to Use
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-34
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-30.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-35
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-24.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-36
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-73.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then – very carefully – make a few
moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
5-37
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system – for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in – be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change – for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
battery. When it is time for a new battery, get one that
has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
5-38
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-39
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
5-40
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle with the dead
battery has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-41
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move.
The electrical
connection is just as
good there, and
the chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-42
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminals to their original positions.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-43
Headlamp Aiming
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe
your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend
that you take your vehicle to the dealer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
by following the procedure in the service manual for
your vehicle.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
Bulb Replacement
For bulb types, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-49.
For any bulb changing procedures not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
5-44
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the two bolts and the one nut that retain
the headlamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the two bolts and the one nut and remove
the headlamp assembly.
4. Remove the headlamp cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Release the spring that retains the bulb.
6. Remove the old bulb.
7. Install the new bulb.
8. Install the bulb retaining spring.
9. Install the wiring harness connector to the bulb and
replace the headlamp cap by turning it clockwise.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 to install the headlamp
assembly. Then, check the lamps.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb socket out of the lamp housing.
5. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
5-45
6. Install the new bulb into the holder by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
7. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 to install the assembly.
Then, check the lamps.
Turn Signal Lamps (Side)
3. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by pulling
the bulb straight out of the holder.
4. Install the new bulb into the bulb holder by pushing
in and turning the bulb holder clockwise.
5. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly back into
its original position.
Fog Lamps
Your vehicle may have this side turn signal lamp.
1. Disconnect the wiring
harness connector
from the front fog
lamp bulb.
2. Turn the front fog lamp bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Install the new bulb.
1. Remove the side turn signal lamp assembly by
pulling it forward.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise.
5-46
4. Connect the wiring harness connector to the front
fog lamp bulb.
Sidemarker Lamps (Front)
Sidemarker Lamps (Rear)
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
3. Turn the front sidemarker bulb socket
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the front sidemarker bulb socket out of the front
bumper.
1. Reach inside of the rear bumper and locate the
socket.
2. Turn the rear sidemarker bulb socket
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the rear sidemaker bulb socket out of the rear
bumper.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the assembly.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the bulb socket.
5-47
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
1. Open the trunk or liftgate.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb socket.
7. Install the new bulb.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to install the lamp
housing. Then, check the lamp.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the trunk or liftgate.
2. Open the trim cover.
2. Remove the two screws which are recessed on the
underside of the hood.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector before you
remove the lamp housing.
4. Remove the lamp housing.
5. Remove the two screws and the reflector assembly.
5-48
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing the
bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up
94535571
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Turn the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp/Sidemarker - Front
and Rear
94535587
7. Replace the trim cover.
Headlamps - High-Beam
94535541
8. Close the trunk or liftgate.
Headlamps - Low-Beam
94535546
Tail/Stoplamp
94535574
Turn Signal - Front and Parking
Lamp
94535578
Turn Signal - Rear
94535572
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-18 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type, see
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 5-91.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-50
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
•
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(Continued)
5-51
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-60.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-57 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Passenger Car Tire Example
5-52
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-72 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-63.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-72 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
5-53
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 70% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-54
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The
load range represents the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum
speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires that hold the
tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles, less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa), before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-55
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum cold
inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-57 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-56
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-59.
Tread Width: The width of the tire’s tread.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-60.
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)
plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing original equipment tire size and
the recommended cold inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
• Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-57
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-59 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-62 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4 for scheduled
rotation intervals.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-58
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-90.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-59
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
Make sure the replacements are the same size, load
range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-61
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-62
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-64 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5-63
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-64
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-65
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Remove the trim cover from the floor of the cargo
area by pulling up on the tab.
The compact spare tire and tools you will need
are located in the cargo area.
2. Remove the foam tray that contains the tools.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
5-66
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
3. Turn the retainer on the compact spare tire
counterclockwise and remove the retainer.
4. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-72 for more information.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, use the jack
handle to begin loosening the wheel covers.
Using the flat end of the jack handle or the
screwdriver, pry along the edge of the wheel cover
until it comes off.
5. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench. The jack is located in the cargo area, in front
of the compact spare tire. Turn the jack retainer,
located on the right side of the jack, counterclockwise
to release it. The jack handle and the wheel wrench
are located inside the foam tray.
2. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
5-67
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
3. Near each wheel is a notch in the frame which the
jack head fits in.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-68
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
7. Remove the flat tire.
5-69
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
5-70
10. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the cargo
area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment.
Place the tire in the compartment, then secure the
retainer. Store the jack in its housing in the cargo area.
Secure the jack by turning the retainer clockwise.
Store the tools securely in the foam tray and place the
tray on top of the tire. Replace the trim cover.
5-71
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the compact spare tire in the compact spare tire
compartment. Place the compact spare tire in the
compartment, then secure the retainer. Store the jack in
its housing in the cargo area. Secure the jack by
turning the retainer clockwise. Store the tools securely
in the foam tray and place the tray on top of the
tire. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-72.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-72
Appearance Care
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Do not use any of these unless this manual says
you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-79.
5-73
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-74
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-79.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
5-75
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
5-76
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold
water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-79.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-79.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-77
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-78
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
5-79
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
5-80
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label inside of the glove box. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the
vehicle.
5-81
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
5-82
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are spare fuses provided in the engine
compartment fuse block. If you ever have a problem on
the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can borrow
one that has the same amperage. Just pick a feature of
your vehicle that you can get along without — like the
radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument
panel fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.
There is a fuse puller located on the engine
compartment fuse block. It can be used to easily
remove fuses from the fuse block.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the end of
the instrument panel, on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door
by pulling out.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs at the back end
first, then push the door into the instrument panel
to secure it.
5-83
5-84
Fuses
AIR BAG
WPR
RADIO/CLK
ECM
Usage
Air Bag
Wiper
Radio/Clock
Engine Control Module
BLANK
Not Used
AUX LTR
Extra Jack
TRN SIG
LAMPS
Turn Signal Lamps
ABS, CRUISE
LTR
Anti-lock Brake System, Cruise
Control System
Cigarette Lighter
CLSTR
Cluster, Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock/Automatic Transaxle Shift
Lock (BTSI) Solenoid
BLANK
Not Used
BCK/UP
Back-up
Fuses
BLANK
Usage
Not Used
TCM
Transmission Control Module
CRUISE
SWITCH
Cruise Switch (Contact Coil)
ENG FUSE
BOX, DRL
Engine Fuse Box, Daytime Running
Lamps
HAZRD LAMPS Hazard Lamps
AUTO A/C
HVAC
RKE
RADIO
S/ROOF
DLC
BLANK
A/C Switch, Clock
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning
Remote Keyless Entry
Radio
Sunroof
Data Link Connector
Not Used
5-85
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location. To access the fuses, press in
the top flap to release the cover.
To reinstall the cover, push the cover until it is secure.
5-86
5-87
Fuses
HEAD LAMPS
ECM
IGN COIL
I/P FUSE
FUEL PUMP
A/C
HORN
HI BEAM
DRIVER’S
PWR WNDW
STOP LAMPS
DR/LCK
MIR HTD
FRT FOG
ILLUM LT
INJ
ENG SNSR
5-88
Usage
Headlamps
Engine Control Module
Ignition Coil
Instrument Panel Fuse
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning
Horn
Headlamp High-Beam
Driver’s Power Window
Stoplamps
Door Lock
Heated Mirror
Front Fog
License Plate Lamp, Parking
Lamp Left
Injector
Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
Canister Purge Solenoid, Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Cooling Fan
Relay, CMP Sensor
Fuses
Usage
LOW BEAM LT Headlamp Low-Beam Left
Illumination Circuit, Parking Lamp
ILLUM RT
Right
LOW BEAM RT Headlamp Low-Beam Right
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
BATT PWR
Battery Power
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
HVAC BLWR HVAC Blower
IGN 2
Ignition 2
IGN 1
Ignition 1
FUSE PLR
Fuse Puller
COOL FAN
Cooling Fan Low
LOW
DEFOG
Defog
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High
PWR WNDW Power Window
Relays
COOL FAN
LOW
FRT FOG
ILLUM
A/C CMPRSR
HORN
DEFOG
Usage
Cooling Fan Low
Front Fog
Illumination Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Horn
Defog
Relays
FUEL PUMP
MAIN
COOL FAN HI
PWR WNDW
HEAD LAMPS
Usage
Fuel Pump
Main Relay
Cooling Fan High
Power Window
Headlamp Relay
5-89
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
1.41 lbs
0.53 quarts
7.9 quarts
4.2 quarts
14.5 gallons
1.2 quarts
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
0.64 kg
Brake/Clutch Fluid
0.5 L
Cooling System
7.5 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.0 L
Fuel Tank
55 L
Power Steering Fluid
1.1 L
Transaxle, Automatic
Complete Overhaul
7.1–7.5 quarts
6.7–7.1 L
Transaxle, Manual
Complete Drain and Refill
1.9 quarts
1.8 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 lb ft
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
5-90
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.0L L4 (L34)
Z
Automatic and
Manual
0.039 inch (1.0 mm)
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades (Shepherd’s Hook Type)
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
Number
96553450
96458873
93742299
96205561
96227855
5-91
✍ NOTES
5-92
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-13
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-18
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-18
At Least Once a Month .................................6-18
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-19
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-20
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-23
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-23
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-23
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-24
Brake System Inspection ................................6-24
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ......6-24
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-26
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may
be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive short distances only a
few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch Fluid
Change (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Filter Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down
slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch Fluid
Change (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
6-6
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Filter Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
Footnotes
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
6-7
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid valve
filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-8
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-9
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-10
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
solenoid valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-11
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-12
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
Footnotes
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid valve
filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-14
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
6-15
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
solenoid valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-16
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-21 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34 for further details.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
6-18
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check your
spare tire. See Tires on page 5-51 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-40 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Restraint System Check
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Automatic Transaxle Check
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Wiper Blade Check
Manual Transaxle Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-76.
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Clutch and Brake Pedal Free Play
Check
Check the clutch pedal and brake pedal for free play
and adjust as necessary.
6-19
At Least Once a Year
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Key Lock Cylinders Service
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
6-20
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try
to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the starter works when the clutch is not
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK only when you press the key release button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. It
should only lock when turned to the right.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-28 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-21
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-22
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-23
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-24
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water (preferably distilled) and good
quality Ethylene Glycol Base Coolant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378560, in
Engine Coolant Canada 993089) and conforming to
GM Specification 1825M or recycled
coolant conforming to GM
Specification 1825M. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transaxle
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
®
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ESSO LT
71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235.
GM Goodwrench Synthetic Manual
Transmission Fluid (GM Part No.
Manual
U.S. 12346190, in Canada
Transaxle
10953477) or equivalent SAE
75W-85 GL-4 gear oil.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Manual
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Transaxle Shift 88901242) or lubricant meeting
Linkage
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip Dielectric
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Conditioning
Canada 992887).
6-25
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-26
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-27
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
7-6
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone
call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
7-7
Plan Ahead When Possible
Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation such
as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day
maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
7-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
event by computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about the condition
of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as engine
speed, brake applications, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air bag
performance data, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-10
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
®
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar , please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-12
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-34
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-82
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-42, 3-46
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-51
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-57
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-60
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-58
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-56
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-54
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ....... 7-10
AM ............................................................... 3-51
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-52
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-31
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-73
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-76
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-79
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-73
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-76
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-78
Appearance Care (cont.)
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Arming the System .........................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Backglass Antenna ......................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD .................................... 3-40,
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Transaxle ........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transaxle Check ..............................
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
5-78
5-79
5-79
5-76
2-16
3-17
3-40
3-52
3-52
3-52
3-44
3-51
3-51
2-19
5-20
2-23
6-19
6-21
B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-52
Battery .......................................................... 5-38
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-20
1
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-28
System Inspection ....................................... 6-24
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-35
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-36
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-44
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-48
Fog Lamps ................................................. 5-46
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-45
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-44
Headlamps ................................................. 5-44
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-49
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-48
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-46
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-60
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
2
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock .............. 2-10
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-90
Carbon Monoxide ........... 4-25, 4-37, 2-11, 2-13, 2-33
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-76
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-52
Your CDs ................................................... 3-52
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-18
CD Messages ........................................ 3-44, 3-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-48
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-28
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-63
Charging System Light .................................... 3-29
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-33
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-33
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-23
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-14
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-79
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-31
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-29
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-45
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ..............................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ..................................
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components .................
Cleaning Leather ............................................
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ...........
Cleaning Tires ................................................
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades ..............
Climate Control System ...................................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Clock ............................................................
1-45
1-48
1-39
1-41
1-38
3-17
5-73
5-76
5-79
5-76
5-78
5-77
5-73
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-78
5-75
5-77
3-19
3-23
3-22
3-18
Clutch and Brake Pedal Free Play Check ........... 6-19
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-20
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-72
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-32
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-24
Cooling System .............................................. 5-27
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-37
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-37
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-13
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-11
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12
3
D
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-13
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-38
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-21
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-32
Disarming the System ..................................... 2-17
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-38
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-15
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
City ........................................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-20
4
Driving (cont.)
Hill and Mountain Roads ..............................
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...........................
Winter ........................................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
4-23
4-16
4-25
4-26
4-18
4-18
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
5-82
5-83
5-82
5-82
5-82
2-12
3-35
5-18
5-38
3-33
5-21
2-21
3-32
6-23
Engine (cont.)
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ......................
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil Level Check ...................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Express-Down Window ....................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
5-12
2-33
5-14
5-24
2-19
5-86
6-18
5-17
6-18
7-10
2-15
3-12
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finding a Station .................................... 3-40, 3-44
Finish Care .................................................... 5-77
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-78
Five-Speed .................................................... 2-27
Flash-to-Pass Feature ....................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-63
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-64
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-20
Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-33
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
FM ............................................................... 3-51
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-37
Fog Lamps .............................................. 3-7, 3-14
Folding the Seatback ........................................ 1-8
Footnotes ................................................ 6-7, 6-13
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-39
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-38
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-39
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-39
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-83
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-82
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-32
Fuel .......................................................... 3-39
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-37
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-44
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-7
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-82
Headlamps .................................................... 5-44
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-44
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-45
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-47
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-46
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-4
6
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-38
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-23
Hold Mode ..................................................... 2-26
Hold Mode Functions ...................................... 2-26
Hold Mode Light ............................................. 3-32
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How the System Alarm is Activated ................... 2-17
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-29
How to Check ................................................ 5-58
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-21
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-33
How to Detect a Tamper Condition .................... 2-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-19
How to Turn Off the System Alarm .................... 2-17
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-20
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-18
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-25
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-34
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-34
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-27
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-21
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-31
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-57
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-24
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-23
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-23
Fuel System ............................................... 6-23
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-23
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-23
Throttle System ........................................... 6-24
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-83
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-20
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Fog Lamps .................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-16,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ......
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ..................
3-12
5-46
3-14
3-13
1-25
1-42
1-45
2-10
2-30
2-13
3-28
3-31
3-30
3-29
3-37
3-38
7
Light (cont.)
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-38
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-37
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-38
Hold Mode ................................................. 3-32
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-39
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-33
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ........................... 3-28
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-13
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-39
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
8
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-91
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-18
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-18
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-20
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-19
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-24
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-23
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-23
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-23
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-26
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-23
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-24
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-33
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Seats ............................................ 1-2, 1-3
Manual Transaxle ............................................ 2-19
Fluid .......................................................... 5-20
Operation ................................................... 2-27
Manual Transaxle Check .................................. 6-19
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-15
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-37
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-35
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-36
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-91
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Opening a Rear Door When the Security
Lock is On ................................................. 2-10
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-37
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-35
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-36
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-13
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-29
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-31
9
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-28
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P)
Mechanism Check ....................................... 6-22
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-32
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-23
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-26
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-23
Passing ......................................................... 4-11
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-42, 3-46
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-40, 3-44
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-16
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-82
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Power Steering ................................................ 4-9
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-28
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
10
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-40
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-52
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-52
Radio with CD .................................... 3-40, 3-44
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-51
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-51
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-39
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-24
Rear Window and Outside Mirror Defogger ......... 3-22
Rear Window Washer/Wiper ............................... 3-9
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-31
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Remote Trunk Release .................................... 2-12
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-67
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-66
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-49
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-38
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-19
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-61
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-60
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-61
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Reminder Tone ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Rear Passenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....
Rear Seat Passengers .................................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .................
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .......................
1-28
3-28
3-28
5-76
1-28
1-15
1-15
1-14
1-24
1-24
1-23
1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-4
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Manual .................................................. 1-2, 1-3
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-45
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-45
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-48
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-33
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-13
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-12
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-41, 3-45
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-41, 3-45
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-78
Shift Speeds .................................................. 2-28
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-31
Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5
11
Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-18
Skidding ........................................................ 4-13
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-19
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-74
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-90
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ............................................. 3-31
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-20
Starting Your Engine ............................... 2-19, 2-20
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-10
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-23
Steering Tips ................................................... 4-9
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-5
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-37
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-37
Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-39
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-38
Glove Box .................................................. 2-37
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-39
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-38
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-71
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-72
12
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .....................
Sunroof .........................................................
4-30
2-16
2-38
2-39
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-48
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-51
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-24
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Time ............................................................. 3-18
Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-18
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-51
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-54
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-55
Tires ............................................................. 5-51
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-60
Chains ....................................................... 5-63
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-64
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-63
Tires (cont.)
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-57
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-60
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-62
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-59
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-41
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-30
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-31
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-37
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-20
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23
Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................ 2-27
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-12
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-27
Trunk ............................................................ 2-11
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
U
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-22
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-51
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-60
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-63
Using an MP3 CD .......................................... 3-47
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-74
Using the Rear Door Security Lock ................... 2-10
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Parking Your ............................................... 2-32
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-81
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-81
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-38
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22
Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-16
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-24
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-76
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-15
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
What to Use .......................................... 5-22, 5-34
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-62
Replacement ............................................... 5-62
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-15
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 5-17
When to Check .............................................. 5-58
When to Check and What to Use ..................... 5-20
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-33
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-19
14
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-11
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-15
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Manual ...................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-34
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-18
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-50
Fuses ........................................................ 5-82
Windshield Wiper Lever ..................................... 3-8
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-19
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement